supplier qualification
TRANSCRIPT
SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier QualificationBased on SAP Solution Manager Content
Target Audience System Administrators Consultants
INTERNALDocument version 10 ndash 2011-11-08
Document History
CAUTION
Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of SAP Solution
Manager content For more information on the SAP Solution Manager content see SAP Note
1853038
The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes
Version Date Description
10 2011-11-08 Initial Version
262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7
Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 9
21 Activate Business Function 9
22 SAP Notes 9
23 User Management 9
231 User Management 9
232 More Information About User Management 10
24 Technical Settings 10
241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10
242 Performing Technical Settings 11
243 More Information About Technical Settings 11
25 E-Mail Settings 12
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-
SUS) 12
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
2612 Role Settings 13
26121 Activate Role 13
2613 IDoc Settings 13
26131 Setting Up IDocs 13
2614 Settings for the Replication 16
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local
ExtCl) 19
2621 Technical Settings 19
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362
26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21
2622 Role and User Settings 21
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services
to SAP ERP 27
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
28 Questionnaire Settings 28
29 Self-Registration User Interface 28
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29
212 Business Add-Ins 29
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 33
31 SAP Notes 33
32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34
322 E-Mail Settings 35
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
325 Questionnaire Settings 37
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier
Directory 40
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-
SUS) 40
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
342 Role Settings 13
3421 Activate Role 13
343 IDoc Settings 13
3431 Setting Up IDocs 13
344 Settings for the Replication 44
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended
Classic) 47
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-
Services 47
352 Technical Settings 47
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
353 Role and User Settings 21
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
36 Business Add-Ins 52
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
371 Importing Business Scenarios 29
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier
Qualification 57
42 Registering Suppliers 57
43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Document History
CAUTION
Before you start the implementation make sure you have the latest version of SAP Solution
Manager content For more information on the SAP Solution Manager content see SAP Note
1853038
The following table provides an overview of the most important document changes
Version Date Description
10 2011-11-08 Initial Version
262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7
Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 9
21 Activate Business Function 9
22 SAP Notes 9
23 User Management 9
231 User Management 9
232 More Information About User Management 10
24 Technical Settings 10
241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10
242 Performing Technical Settings 11
243 More Information About Technical Settings 11
25 E-Mail Settings 12
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-
SUS) 12
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
2612 Role Settings 13
26121 Activate Role 13
2613 IDoc Settings 13
26131 Setting Up IDocs 13
2614 Settings for the Replication 16
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local
ExtCl) 19
2621 Technical Settings 19
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362
26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21
2622 Role and User Settings 21
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services
to SAP ERP 27
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
28 Questionnaire Settings 28
29 Self-Registration User Interface 28
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29
212 Business Add-Ins 29
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 33
31 SAP Notes 33
32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34
322 E-Mail Settings 35
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
325 Questionnaire Settings 37
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier
Directory 40
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-
SUS) 40
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
342 Role Settings 13
3421 Activate Role 13
343 IDoc Settings 13
3431 Setting Up IDocs 13
344 Settings for the Replication 44
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended
Classic) 47
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-
Services 47
352 Technical Settings 47
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
353 Role and User Settings 21
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
36 Business Add-Ins 52
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
371 Importing Business Scenarios 29
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier
Qualification 57
42 Registering Suppliers 57
43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Important Information About This Document 7
Chapter 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 9
21 Activate Business Function 9
22 SAP Notes 9
23 User Management 9
231 User Management 9
232 More Information About User Management 10
24 Technical Settings 10
241 Supplier Qualification Overview 10
242 Performing Technical Settings 11
243 More Information About Technical Settings 11
25 E-Mail Settings 12
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer 12
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-
SUS) 12
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
2612 Role Settings 13
26121 Activate Role 13
2613 IDoc Settings 13
26131 Setting Up IDocs 13
2614 Settings for the Replication 16
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication 18
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (Local
ExtCl) 19
2621 Technical Settings 19
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 362
26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21
2622 Role and User Settings 21
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services
to SAP ERP 27
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
28 Questionnaire Settings 28
29 Self-Registration User Interface 28
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29
212 Business Add-Ins 29
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 33
31 SAP Notes 33
32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34
322 E-Mail Settings 35
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
325 Questionnaire Settings 37
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier
Directory 40
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-
SUS) 40
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
342 Role Settings 13
3421 Activate Role 13
343 IDoc Settings 13
3431 Setting Up IDocs 13
344 Settings for the Replication 44
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended
Classic) 47
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-
Services 47
352 Technical Settings 47
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
353 Role and User Settings 21
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
36 Business Add-Ins 52
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
371 Importing Business Scenarios 29
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier
Qualification 57
42 Registering Suppliers 57
43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
26212 More Information About Technical Settings 21
2622 Role and User Settings 21
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI) 24
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP 25
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services
to SAP ERP 27
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
28 Questionnaire Settings 28
29 Self-Registration User Interface 28
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 28
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services 29
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL) 29
212 Business Add-Ins 29
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
2131 Importing Business Scenarios 29
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch
Supplier Self-Registration 33
31 SAP Notes 33
32 Supplier Qualification Applications 33
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification 33
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview 33
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification 34
322 E-Mail Settings 35
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners 28
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services 36
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings 27
325 Questionnaire Settings 37
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory 37
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection 25
462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier
Directory 40
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-
SUS) 40
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
342 Role Settings 13
3421 Activate Role 13
343 IDoc Settings 13
3431 Setting Up IDocs 13
344 Settings for the Replication 44
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended
Classic) 47
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-
Services 47
352 Technical Settings 47
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
353 Role and User Settings 21
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
36 Business Add-Ins 52
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
371 Importing Business Scenarios 29
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier
Qualification 57
42 Registering Suppliers 57
43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
332 Configuring Supplier Directory 27
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier
Directory 40
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-
SUS) 40
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-
Services 12
342 Role Settings 13
3421 Activate Role 13
343 IDoc Settings 13
3431 Setting Up IDocs 13
344 Settings for the Replication 44
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data 16
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication 45
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001 17
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended
Classic) 47
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-
Services 47
352 Technical Settings 47
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services 19
353 Role and User Settings 21
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management 21
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings 24
36 Business Add-Ins 52
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 29
371 Importing Business Scenarios 29
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces 31
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings 31
Chapter 4 Supplier Qualification 57
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier
Qualification 57
42 Registering Suppliers 57
43 Managing Supplier Relationship 57
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
1 Important Information About This Document
The configuration documentation for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is delivered
with the SAP Solution Manager content To implement and configure SAP SRM you must use SAP
Solution Manager which contains the complete configuration documentation including links to
Customizing SAP Notes and SAP ERP documentation
This guide contains only the SAP SRM configuration documentation and references to other
documentation It provides you with a quick overview of the required SAP SRM configuration settings
CAUTION
This guide is a supplement to the SAP Solution Manager content and does not replace it The
complete configuration content and tool support is only available in SAP Solution Manager
For more information on the SAP Solution Manager Content see SAP Note 1853038 and the SAP
SRM master guide at httpservicesapcominstguides under Installation and Upgrade
Guides SAP Business Suite Applications SAP SRM SAP SRM Server 713
Business Functions
SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 70 (SRM 70) includes the
following Business Functions
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations
SRM Catalog Innovations
SRM Approval Process
SRM Continuous Innovations
SRM Implementation Simplification
SRM Service Procurement Innovations
SRM PI-Independent Enterprise Services
SRM Supplier Collaboration
SRM Self-Service Procurement
SRM Analytics
SRM Strategic Sourcing Innovations 2
SRM Analytics 2
SRM Continuous Innovations 2
SRM Catalog Innovations 2
SRM Supplier Collaboration 2
1 Important Information About This Document
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 762
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
For more information about these business functions see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom
SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Functions and Customizing Switches
1 Important Information About This Document
862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Activate Business Functions
22 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
517484
729355
836200
23 User Management
231 User Management
For the registration of new suppliers no user logon is required The registration is performed with an
anonymous user with the necessary authorizations
Prerequisites
You must have created the anonymous user in transaction SU01
You have assigned the roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR to this user
The user has to be of type service user
Procedure
Assigning Anonymous Users
You need to assign the anonymous user to the self-registration service (ROS_SELF_REG) You can find
the service in transaction Maintain Services (SICF) by searching for all services and then choosing
DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP ROS_SELF_REG
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
21 Activate Business Function
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 962
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
1 Double-click the service name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
Maintain Services (SICF) by right-clicking on the related services and selecting Activate Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are the following
ROS_SELF_REG
ROS_SELF_EDIT
ROS_PRESCREEN
You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
232 More Information About User Management
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration User Management Define Roles
24 Technical Settings
241 Supplier Qualification Overview
Features
Figure 1
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
1062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
242 Performing Technical Settings
Procedure
Activating Supplier Qualification Services
Web Dynpro applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in
transaction Maintain Services SICF by right-clicking the corresponding service and selecting Activate
Service
The services for Supplier Qualification are WDA_E_SUCO_SREG WDA_SUCO_POWL and WDA_L_FPM_OIF You can
find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC WEBDYNPRO SAPSRM
Detecting the Self-Registration URL to Place on your Homepage
To identify the URL that you can place on your home page to direct users to the self-registration
application proceed as follows
1 In transaction Object Navigator SE80 select Package from the dropdown box enter SAPSRM
CH_WD_UI_MO_SUCO in the field below and click Display
2 Expand the node Web Dynpro Web Dynpro Applicat
3 Double-click SAPSRMWDA_E_SUCO_SREG
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify the language and the client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client and need to be inserted after the
question mark (That is for example URLsap-client=200)
Assigning a User to the Service for Anonymous Login
Prerequisites
You have created a user in transaction User Maintenance SU01 You have assigned the role SAPSRM
SUCO_ANON_REG to it The user can be used to display and fill out he supplier self-registration page
Procedure
Enter the user created as a prerequisite in the properties of the service WDA_E_SUCO_SREG on the tab
page Logon Data On this tab you also can specify the client and the language to be used to display the
page If you leave the field Language empty the language selected in the browser of the person displaying
the supplier self-registration page is applied
243 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
Maintain Services SICF
Run the following program in SAP SRM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
24 Technical Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1162
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Delete Rejected Suppliers ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
25 E-Mail Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPConnect mdash Administration SCOT
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration E-Mail Notification Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
Prerequisites
Before you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
Procedure
Steps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
25 E-Mail Settings
1262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
2612 Role Settings
26121 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
2613 IDoc Settings
26131 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1362
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1562
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
2614 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1762
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
The following SAP Note applies
756472
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
1862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management
Functions Supplier Qualification
2621 Technical Settings
26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 1962
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
26212 More Information About Technical Settings
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance SICF
The following SAP Note applies
517484
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Settings for Supplier Replication
2622 Role and User Settings
26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2162
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2362
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partner
Supplier Collaboration RFx Response Submission Outside Firewall Master Data Define External Web
Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Role Maintenance PFCG
Change Attributes PPOMA_BBP
264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2562
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
2662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Supplier Transfer Define Transfer Settings
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2762
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
28 Questionnaire Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Overview of Surveys ROS_QSTN_SURVEY
Translation Initial Screen SE63
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Questionnaire Settings
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Note applies
840661
29 Self-Registration User Interface
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen
210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
28 Questionnaire Settings
2862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Perform the following activity in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Self-Registration Screen Specify Data Privacy Settings for
Suppliers
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
Perform the activities under the following node in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Personal Objects Worklist Settings
212 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management
Supplier Collaboration Supplier Self-Registration Business Add-Ins
Supplier Self-Services Business Add-Ins Master Data Extension for Duplication Check
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2131 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 2962
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
3062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3162
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
840661
517484
836200
729355
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
Figure 2
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
31 SAP Notes
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3362
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
Prerequisites
You have to make the settings below in the client where Supplier Qualification runs You can run Supplier
Qualification in a separate client to SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) or you can run
Supplier Qualification in the supplier self-services (SUS) client
CAUTION
You must first make settings for the Web Survey application To send questionnaires from the
SAP system by e-mail the SAPconnect component must be set up for Internet services
See the documentation for SAPconnect in SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP
NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability
Application Platform by Key Capability Platform-Wide Services Connectivity Communication Interfaces
for Mail and Telephony SAPconnect (BC-SRV-COM)
For more information see the following SAP Note
455140 Configuration of e-mail fax pagingSMS via SMTP
The Supplier Qualification application does not require user login It runs with an anonymous user
with the necessary authorizations
This user has to be created by the customer in transaction SU01
The roles SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEUSER and SAP_EC_BBP_CREATEVENDOR have to be assigned
to this user
The user type has to be Service user
Create hierarchies in transaction COMM_HIERARCHY
Assign hierarchies to applications in transaction COMM_PRAPPLCAT
Product categories should be available in the supplier self-registration system You can create
product categories manually accordingly to the SAP SRM system or replicate them from the SAP
ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier self-
registration system
Procedure
Maintaining Questionnaires
See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Assigning Anonymous User
Assign the anonymous user to the self-registration application (ROS_SELF_REG)
You can find the application in transaction HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF) by searching
for all services and then clicking on DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
ROS_SELF_REG
1 Double-click the application name
2 On the Service Data tab page enter the user name password and client
Activating Supplier Qualification Applications
BSP applications are deactivated for security reasons You therefore have to activate them in transaction
SICF by right-clicking ROS_SELF_REG and selecting Activate Service
The applications for supplier qualification are ROS_SELF_REG ROS_SELF_EDIT and
ROS_PRESCREEN You can find them under DEFAULT_HOST SAP BC BSP SAP
Placing Self-Registration URL on Your Homepage
To place a URL on your homepage to link to the self-registration application
1 In transaction SE80 choose BSP application enter ROS_SELF_REG and choose Display
2 Expand Pages with Flow Logic
3 Double-click mainhtm
4 The URL is displayed on the Properties tab page
NOTE
On your homepage you can use additional URL parameters to specify language and client
The parameter names are sap-language and sap-client (that is URLsap-client=200)
Deleting All Suppliers Rejected During Supplier Preselection
During supplier preselection a purchaser user can set different statuses for the registered suppliers If
you want to remove all suppliers with the status Rejected from the system you can use report
ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP
322 E-Mail Settings
The following SAP Notes apply
455140
779972
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
SAPconnect mdash Administration (SCOT)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3562
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
Prerequisites
You have defined organizational plans for suppliers see Defining Organizational Plans for Suppliers
[external document]
You have defined a URL for User Management Registration see Setting up Services for Supplier Self-
Services [page 19]
To check whether the organizational plan for suppliers has been correctly defined use transaction
Vendor Groups (BBP) Change (PPOMV_BBP)
Procedure
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
1 Replace the specified URL (wwwxyz-supplier-portalcom) with the following http
ltUMgtltportgtsus_selfreg
2 Enter data as described in the Customizing activity
3 Choose Save
3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Create Supplier Groups (PPOCV_BBP)
Change Supplier Groups (PPOMV_BBP)
HTTP Service Hierarchy Maintenance (SICF)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
Supplier Self-Services Settings for User Interface Specify Data Privacy Settings for Suppliers
Run the following program in SAP SRM
Delete Rejected Suppliers (ROS_DELETE_REJECTED_BP)
324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
Maintain Categories and Hierarchies (COMM_HIERARCHY)
Assign Hierarchies to Applications (COMM_PRAPPLCAT)
Perform the following activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
32 Supplier Qualification Applications
3662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
SAP Product Product Category Assign Category Hierarchies to Applications
Product categories should be available in the supplier registration system You can create product
categories manually or replicate them from the SAP ERP back-end system
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that you create the product categories manually in the supplier registration
system The product categories do not need to be the same as in the SAP ERP or SAP SRM system
For more information about category settings see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt
Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM Master Data Replication Checking
Completion of Download
325 Questionnaire Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM under Supplier Registration Basic
Settings
CreateChange Questionnaire
Select Product Categories for Registration
Language Selection for Questionnaire
Assign Questionnaire and Language to Product Category
For more information see SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver ltreleasegt Library
SAP Library SAP NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability
Business Services Web Survey
The following SAP Notes apply
840661
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
Procedure
Using transaction PFCG you have to attach the client of the registration system (if you use supplier
self-services this is the supplier self-services client) to the URL of the service This way SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) is able to start supplier preselection in the correct client
If the registration system is located in another system the URL has to be replaced with the actual URL
in transaction PFCG
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3762
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Complete the following steps in the SAP SRM System
1 In transaction PFCG select the role SAPSRMST_PURCHASER Select other roles where you
have maintained the BSP application Preselect Suppliers as well
2 On the Menu tab expand Business Partner right-click Preselect Suppliers and choose Change Nodes
3 In the parameter table that appears enter the name sap-client and as the value enter the client
number that is used by the registration system
4 Save your data
Complete the following steps in the registration system
CAUTION
To execute supplier preselection the SAP SRM user must also exist in the registration system
1 Assign the users that are allowed to work with the supplier preselection application
CAUTION
Before you can copy these users you have to create an organizational unit for the
corresponding users See Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) under Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for the Business Partners
You have to copy the corresponding users from the SAP SRM system because supplier
preselection is carried out in another system or in another client
The SAP SRM system from which you want to extract the users has to be available via RFC
2 After the creation of the node you can select and copy users into the supplier registration system
with the GUI transaction USERS_GEN
3 Choose Copy User and Employee Data from Template
4 Select Import Users from Other System via RFC
5 Enter the initial password and choose the organizational unit you have created before
6 Select the users that you want to transfer into the registration system and start the process
NOTE
If you want to create users only partially delete them delete their assignment to a position
and the position itself before you repeat the procedure
Make Settings for Single Sign-On (SSO)
RECOMMENDATION
We recommend activating SSO (either ticket-based or certificate-based) so that you can access
supplier preselection directly from the SAP SRM menu
NOTE
For information on how to set up Single Sign-On see the Security Guide for SAP NetWeaver
Application Server at httpservicesapcomsecurity Security in Detail SAP Security Guides
If SSO is activated there is no need for another logon to the supplier registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
3862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
If SSO is not activated the SAP SRM user has to logon to the supplier registration system before starting
supplier preselection
Open Partner Interface (OPI)
Supplier Preselection as Supplier Directory in SAP SRM
To transfer suppliers from the registration system via OPI into SAP SRM you have to define the supplier
preselection application as supplier directory in SAP SRM
NOTE
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define
External Web Services
URL for Supplier Preselection httpltserverdomainportgtsapbcbspsapros_precreen
maindo
Replace ltserverdomainportgt with the corresponding values for the SAP NetWeaver Application
Server of the registration system If the values are unknown you can find them in the registration
system using transaction SE80
Select package ROS_PRESCREEN and follow the path Web Objects BSP Applications Enter
ros_prescreen into the field box Expand the folder Controller
Double click on maindo to display details for example the complete URL
You must assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups via
transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also section User Organizational data )
Include the (External) Supplier Directory in Supplier Preselection
The supplier preselection application itself can access further supplier directories via OPI and use data
from them
The supplier directories that are to be available in the extended search in supplier preselection must be
maintained in the registration system
See Customizing for SAP SRM under SAP Supplier Relationship Management SRM Server Master Data
Content Management Define External Web Services
You can also copy existing entries from the SAP SRM system using the Business Configuration Set
You must then assign the corresponding values of the user attribute CAT to the users or user groups
via transaction PPOMA_BBP (see also the section User Organizational Data )
NOTE
The procedure is exactly the same as in the SAP SRM system but as the registration system is in
another client or system the settings must be repeated in the registration system
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 3962
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
332 Configuring Supplier Directory
Procedure
Define Organizational Assignment when Transferring Supplier to SRM Server
To ensure correct data flow when Supplier Directory is called via OPI from SRM Server you have to
define the supplier root the root of the purchasing organization and the currency in table
BBP_MARKETP_INFO in the SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) system Use
transaction SM30 to edit the table For more information on the data that has to be entered see Creating
the Organizational Plan [external document]
333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Master Data Content Management Define External Web Services
SRM Server Master Data Create Users Import Users from File or from Other System
SRM Server RFx Activate Temporary Contact Person Creation
Run the following system transactions in SAP SRM
RFC Destinations (DisplayMaintain) (SM 59)
Role Maintenance (PFCG)
Change Attributes (PPOMA_BBP)
Call View Maintenance (SM30)
Object Navigator (SE80)
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
Only after the purchaser administrator has performed the initial business partner administration the
procurement process between the suppliers using supplier self-services and the purchasers is enabled
For this purpose the purchaser must first obtain the necessary information from the supplier including
details about the services or products (direct materials) which the supplier is able to provide
PrerequisitesBefore you can replicate suppliers the supplier root organization unit must have been created in the
supplier self-services system
ProcedureSteps for replicating suppliers from SAP ERP to supplier self-services
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
1 Configure the partner profile
2 Create a model view
3 Establish the connection from Materials Management to SAP NetWeaver PI and to supplier self-
services
4 Create a vendor master in Materials Management and assign class type ALV under the Environment
Classification tab
5 Run transaction BD14 and enter values for the following fields
1 Vendor number
2 Class
3 Message type
4 Target System
After you have run BD14 check in the SAP ERP system whether the IDoc has been generated and sent
to the SAP NetWeaver PI system If this is the case check the status in transaction SXMB_MONI in SAP
NetWeaver PI Finally check the same in the supplier self-services system
342 Role Settings
3421 Activate Role
Procedure
If you have implemented Supplier Qualification without SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP
SRM) you have to activate role SAPSRMSUCO_PROCESSOR and assign it to your purchaser This
means that your purchaser is able to access all of the supplier management functions
Run the following system transaction in SAP SRM Role Maintenance (PFCG)
343 IDoc Settings
3431 Setting Up IDocs
In this section you create a reduced message type within the customer namespace define change-
relevant fields and define an object class before assigning the message type to this class
Procedure
Creating a Reduced Message Type
Transaction Code
BD53
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDoc Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Scope of Data for Distribution Message Reduction Create Reduced Message Type
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4162
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
1 Based on reference message type CREMAS create the reduced message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM with
the following segments
E1LFA1M () Segment for general vendor data
| |__ E1LFA1A (+) Segment for standard vendor data - enhancement
|__ E1LFM1M (+) Segment for purchasing organization data vendor SMD
2 Ensure segment E1LFA1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Account number of vendor or creditor
KTOKK () Vendor account group
LAND1 () Country of company
NAME1 () Employees last name
NAME2 (+) Employees last name
ORT01 () City
ORT02 (+) District
PFACH (+) PO Box
PSTL2 () Postal Code
PSTLZ () Postal Code
REGIO (+) Region (State Province County)
SORTL () Character field length = 10
SPRAS () Language key
STCD1 (+) Tax number 1
STCD2 (+) Tax number 2
STRAS (+) House number and street
TELF1 (+) First telephone number
TELFX (+) Fax number
ADRNR (+) Address
TXJCD (+) Jurisdiction for tax calculation - tax jurisdiction code
3 Ensure segment E1LFA1A contains the following fields
Field Text
LFURL (+) Uniform resource locator
4 Ensure segment E1LFM1M contains the following fields
Field Text
MSGFN () Function
LIFNR () Vendors account number
EKORG () Purchasing organization
WAERS () Purchase order currency
5 Choose Activate change pointers to enable subsequent synchronization of the supplier data
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
CAUTION
After creating the reduced message type ensure the segments E1LFA1M and E1LFA1A contain
the fields marked with (+)
Defining Change-Relevant Fields
Transaction Code BD52
Menu Path Tools ALE ALE Development IDocs Engineering Change Management Define Change-Relevant Fields
1 Choose work area (message type) Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 Delete the following entry
Object Table Field
KRED LFA1 ADRNR
Defining an Object Class for Master Data Distribution
Prerequisites
If the class type ALV is available you have assigned the supplier LFA1 to class type ALV as follows
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Double-click on the ALV class type
5 Select Multiple classification and Distrclass type
6 Save your entries
If the class type ALV is not available you have done the following assignment
1 In the Implementation Guide go to Cross-Application Components Classification System Classes
Maintain Object Types and Class Types
2 Choose vendor LFA1
3 Double-click Class Types
4 Copy Class Type 010 with a new name (ALV)
5 Enter the Class Type description Lists for vendor distribution
6 Select Multiple classification and Distr class type under the Functions section
7 Save your entries
Procedure
Transaction Code CL01
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)Classification Classes Maintain Object Types and Class Types
1 Choose Class type ALV
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4362
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
2 Create Class for example Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt
3 On the Basic Data tab page enter a description for example Supplier Self-Services Supplier
Replication
4 Ensure that the Status is set to Released
5 Choose Save
Assigning Message Type to Distribution Object Class
Transaction Code
BD68
Menu Path SAP Customizing Implementation Guide SAP NetWeaver Application Server IDOC Interface Application Link Enabling (ALE) Modeling and Implementing Business Processes Master Data Distribution
Distribution Using Object Classes Assign Classes to Receiving Logical System
1 Choose Logical system ltSUS_BSgtCLNTltclientgt
2 Choose New Entries
3 Enter a record with the following data
Message Type Class PoP
Z_CREMAS_SUSMM Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt 2 (Push)
344 Settings for the Replication
The section Setting Up Supplier Account Numbers in the document Setting up Supplier Master Data is not relevant
to the business process Managing Supplier Relationship
Regarding document Configuring User Exit VSV00001 you do not have to program the user exits
EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 or EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 (section with the caution icon) for the business process
Managing Supplier Relationships
3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
In this section you create replicate and synchronize supplier master data To enable the Evaluated
Receipt Settlement (ERS) process for a vendor you specify the account number together with the
company code
Procedure
Setting up Vendor Account Numbers
Transaction Code XK01
Menu Path Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Vendor Central Create
1 On the Correspondence Accounting screen enter the company code in the Acc w Vendorfield
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
2 Select Environment Classification and select the class type ALV when required Assign the class
Z_CRED_SUSMM_ltSUS_BSgt to the supplier
3 In the supplier address data under Street Address enter a city and a country
NOTE
Only vendors for whom you have entered address data are replicated in SUS
4 Choose Communication and enter an e-mail address
NOTE
Make sure that you use an Account Group with an e-mail address As a prerequisite you have
determined for this account group that the internet mail address is required You do this in
transaction OMSG under Field Status General Data Communication
See Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General Business Partner Vendors Control
Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)
Initially Replicating Vendor Data
Transaction Code BD14
Menu Path Tools ALE Master Data Distribution Cross-Application Vendor Send
1 In the Send Vendor screen enter the reduced message type for example Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
2 For parallel processing enter a value in the Number of Vendors per Process field
3 Choose Execute
Synchronizing Vendor Data
Transaction Code SE38
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
1 Choose report RBDMIDOC
2 Create variant MM-SUS
3 Maintain variant MM-SUS with message type Z_CREMAS_SUSMM
NOTE
Using transaction SM36 define a job with report RBDMIDOC and variant MM-SUS
3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
Run the following program in SAP ERP
Creating IDoc Type from Change Pointers (RBDMIDOC)
3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
To enable the IDoc transfer of supplier e-mail addresses to the supplier self-services system you add
coding to a user exit in the supplier master data and you assign the user exit to a project
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4562
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
CAUTION
You must also program the user exits EXIT_SAPLEINM_001 and EXIT_SAPLEINM_005 to enable
purchase order response For more information see SAP Note 756472
Prerequisites
You have created a customer project for example ZPSMM
Procedure
Defining the Identification Type
Transaction code CMOD
Menu Path Tools ABAP Workbench Utilities Enhancements Project Management
1 Choose Project ZPSMM
2 Choose Enhancement Assignments and assign enhancement VSV00001 and component
EXIT_SAPLKD01_001 to the project
3 Add the following coding to user exit Customer and Vendor Distribution ReceiptIssue
data ls_data_a type E1LFA1A
ls_data_m type E1LFA1M
ls_idoc_data type edidd
lv_index type sy-tabix
if segment_name = E1LFA1A
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = E1LFA1M
ls_data_m = ls_idoc_data-sdata
clear ls_idoc_data
read table idoc_data into ls_idoc_data with key segnam = segment_name
ls_data_a = ls_idoc_data-sdata
lv_index = sy-tabix
select single smtp_addr from adr6 into ls_data_a-lfurl
where addrnumber = ls_data_m-ADRNR
and flgdefault = X
ls_idoc_data-sdata = ls_data_a
modify idoc_data from ls_idoc_data index lv_index
endif
4 Activate the enhancement assignment
NOTE
Ensure that the display of your project shows a green light for user exit EXIT_SAPLKD01_001
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
4662 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
Procedure
To replicate suppliers from SAP SRM to supplier self-services you must select the Portal Supplier indicator
You can do this selection before replication When this indicator is set the data is replicated
automatically
Result
The following process starts automatically
1 Supplier self-services sends an e-mail notification to the supplier administrator This e-mail
contains the registration ID and the URL required to log on to supplier self-services
2 The supplier administrator logs on to supplier self-services and uses the registration ID to create
users
3 Supplier self-services automatically sends a registration e-mail containing a registration ID and
URL to each of the users
4 The supplier users log on to supplier self-services
352 Technical Settings
3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
You need to make the following settings to use Business Server Pages (BSP) as a user interface and start
the self-registration directly You define a user called sus_service which is to be used for anonymous
login for the self-registration
For more information about activating SICF Services see SAP Solution Manager under SAP SRM
Configuration SAP SRM 70 EHP1 Basic Settings for Service Procurement Classic Settings for Supplier
Collaboration Settings for Supplier Self-Services Setting Up Services for SUS Activate SICF Services
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the Supplier Self-Services (SUS) system
Creating and Assigning Users
Transaction Code SU01
1 Enter a user name for example sus_service
2 Choose Create
3 Choose the Logon data tab page and set the Service indicator in the User Type screen area
4 Choose the Roles tab page and assign the following roles
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4762
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
SAP_BC_BASIS_MONITORING
SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_SUPPL_EHP1
5 Choose Save
Activating SICF Services
Transaction Code SICF
NOTE
For more information about inactive services in the Internet Communication see SAP Note
517484
Activate the following SICF services for SUS by choosing Activate Service in the context menu
sap bc bsp sap system System Services Business Server Pages
sap bc bsp sap public bc Basis Mime Objects
sap public bsp sap htmlb HTMLB Public Handler
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_scripts THTMLB Scripts
sap bc bsp sap thtmlb_styles CSS stylesheets and GIF for THTMLB tag library
sap public bc
sap bc bsp sap srmsus SUS Supplier Self-Services
sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
sap bc bsp sap bbp_sus_sagent (only relevant for Service Procurement)
sap public bsp sap public bc
sap public bsp sap system
sap public bc ur
sap webcuif uif_callback Generic callback
sap xi
Creating Aliases
Transaction Code SICF
Creating an alias for supplier self-registration
1 Choose Execute
2 Choose External Aliases
3 In the context menu (secondary mouse button) for the virtual host choose Create External Aliases
The Maintain external aliases dialog box appears
4 Enter an appropriate name in the External Alias field for example sus_selfreg
5 On the Logon data tab page enter the name of the user you created before (see ldquoCreating and Assigning
Userrdquo) for example sus_service If you use HTTPS select the radio button SSL in the Security
Requirements area
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
4862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
NOTE
We recommend that you use HTTPS You can create and activate the service in transaction
SMICM
6 Enter a password
7 Choose the Trg Element tab page and enter the service target by choosing a node in the Virtual Hosts
Services selection tree as follows
ltname of virtual hostgt sap bc bsp sap srmsus_selfreg
8 Save your entries
9 Test the SICF service for example by calling httpslthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsap
srmsus_selfreg
Adjusting URLs
Transaction Code SICF
Customizing Path Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Make Settings for Business Partners
To adjust the URL for self-registration change the URL in the URL for UM field
NOTE
Enter the same path that you used as the external alias in ldquoCreating an alias for supplier self-
registrationrdquo in this case httpslthostnamedomaingtltportgtsus_selfreg
This URL is sent by e-mail to the corresponding user and enables the user to start the self-registration
process
Result
The SICF services for SUS are activated The URL for suppliers is maintained so that the self-registration
can be started directly
353 Role and User Settings
3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
When administrating user data of suppliers in addition to the administration in supplier self-services
you can replicate the supplier user data to other components for example SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence (SAP NetWeaver BI) and SAP Bidding Engine
You replicate the user data of suppliers in SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) for
bidding or in SAP NetWeaver BI for reporting (analytics)
In this procedure you do the following
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 4962
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Define the settings for business partners to replicate the business partners and to create users
through user management
Make the relevant settings for the https protocol if required
Adjust the roles for supplier self-services user management in the supplier self-services back end
if required
Run a supplier self-services (SUS) upgrade if required
Procedure
Perform the following steps in the supplier self-services system
Performing SAP SRM Administrator Setup
Run transaction SU01 create a dialog user (for example srm_admin) and assign the role SAP SRM
SUS Administrator Purchaser (SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1) to it
NOTE
Make sure that a valid e-mail address first name and last name are assigned to this user The user
name allows you to log in to supplier self-services which you access via http
lthostnamegtltportgtsapbcbspsapsrmsus Additionally this user can act as an SAP SRM
administrator
CAUTION
The role SAPSRMSUS_ADMIN_PURCH_EHP1 gives the user a wide range of authorizations and
should only be assigned after careful consideration
Defining Settings for the Secure Sockets Layer Protocol
For encrypting data from browser to system you can make settings for the HTTPS protocol if required
You can find more information on SAP Help Portal at httphelpsapcom SAP NetWeaver SAP
NetWeaver Library SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Security Network and Transport Layer Security Using the
Secure Sockets Layer Protocol with the AS ABAP
Defining Roles
Customizing Path SAP Implementation Guide SAP Supplier Relationship Management Supplier Self-Services Master Data Define Roles
1 Using input help choose one of the roles listed in the documentation of Customizing activity
Define roles
If you want to change attributes of a role copy the corresponding role in transaction PFCG to a
new role in the customer name space and correct this one Examples for changing attributes
Authorizations or menu entries
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
5062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
NOTE
For all roles maintained in transaction PFCG an attribute set for supplier self-services specific
settings exist For maintaining this set select the corresponding role in transaction PFCG
2 Choose Change Role
3 Choose the Personalization tab
NOTE
The personalization is valid for all roles Users can create their own roles for example as copy
of the delivered SAP roles Users can adjust created roles by changing the role attributes
specific to supplier self-services
4 Select the entry BBP_SUS_ROLES_ATTRIBUTES (supplier self-services specific role attributes) and
choose Change values
The system displays the Maintaining SUS specific roles dialog box
5 Perform the following steps if necessary
Selecting Means that
Display role in SUS User Management (UM) Only these roles are displayed in the supplier self-services user management By this the supplier administrator can assign these roles to the respective user
Service agent The user can be displayed as service agent by the buyer
SAP SRM Administrator The user is defined as SAP SRM Administrator In this role the user is authorized to maintain any supplier user data
SUS Administrator This role is automatically assigned to the user while the SUS Administrator is registering himself or herself
Notification if purchase order not opened The user is informed if a purchase order is not opened within a specific period of time
Notification if purchase order response is missing The user is informed if a purchase order response has not been created for a purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if ASN is missing The user is informed if a shipping notification (ASN) has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
Notification if confirmation is missing The user is informed if a confirmation has not been created for a confirmed purchase order for a service within a specific period of time
Notification if invoice is missing The user is informed if an invoice has not been created for a confirmed purchase order within a specific period of time
NOTE
You specify the type of notification in SAP SRM Customizing under SRM Server Cross-
Application Basic Setting Event and Event Schema for Alert Management Define Event Schema The
notification can be a message or an alert If it is a message it takes the form of an e-mail with
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5162
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
a standard text and a URL that links directly to the necessary follow-on activity You have to
make additional settings for alerts (for example the alert category a maximum number of
send attempts the priority or a fixed recipient) in the above Customizing activity
6 Choose Save
Performing a Mass Generation of Profiles
If you have changed roles start the mass generation of profiles For more information see Regenerating
Role Profiles [external document]
Upgrading User Data
CAUTION
You must perform the following steps before you run the user data upgrade After the upgrade
the previous data is no longer available
NOTE
For more information about upgrading the data in SUS User Management see SAP Note
729355
If you want to change from Do the following
User Management Engine (UME) 30 to UME 40
No steps are necessary
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS 20 Run the migration report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM
UME 30 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40 Run the migration reports BBP_SUS_BP_UM_JUM2SUM and BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS UM in SUS 20 to SUS UM in SUS in SRM 40
Run the report BBP_SUS_BP_UM_SUS20_TO_SUS3OT
SUS in SRM 40 to SUS in SAP SRM 50 No steps necessary if report BBP_COPY_FI_INFO_TO_ITEM has already been run
NOTE
In the Customizing activity Maintain Systems for Synchronization of User Data you can enter the systems
to which the user data that was entered in supplier self-services should be replicated
3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
Perform the following activities in Customizing for SAP SRM
SRM Server Cross-Application Basic Settings Roles Define Roles
36 Business Add-Ins
The following Business Add-Ins are available in Customizing for SAP Supplier Relationship
Management under SAP Supplier Relationship Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
36 Business Add-Ins
5262 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Customer Text for Registration Screen
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Definition of Required Fields for Customers
Supplier Registration Business Add-Ins Field Checks for Customer-Defined Required Fields
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
371 Importing Business Scenarios
In this section you transfer the business scenario Strategic Sourcing from the SAP Integration
Repository generate it and activate it
Prerequisites
You must have done the following
Defined the business systems for SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM) and SAP ERP
in the SAP System Landscape Directory For more information about SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP NetWeaver PI) see the SAP Marketplace at servicesapcominstguidesNW70
Imported the SAP NetWeaver PI content for SAP SRM into the SAP Integration Repository See
SAP Note 836200
Procedure
1 Log on to the SAP Netweaver PI system
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 In the left pane select the Objects tab
4 Choose Service Without Partner Business System
5 Right-click to display the context menu and choose Business Systems Assign Business System This
opens the wizard
6 Choose Continue The wizard guides you through the required steps
7 Create the business system for both SAP SRM and ERP (you can bypass this step if the business
system is already set up)
8 Select a business system
9 Create communication channels either manually or automatically You can create them
automatically here In this case the systems are applied from the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) Channels must be complete in terms of URLs and authentication information
10 Choose Finish and then choose Close
11 On the main screen choose Tools Transfer Integration Scenario from Integration Repository This opens
a wizard
12 Choose Name then use the input help Select Supply_Base_Management (with namespace http
sapcomxiSRMBasisGlobalIC and component SRM SERVER IC 701)
13 Select Continue The scenario name is Supply_Base_Management
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5362
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
14 Choose Finish and then choose Close The Business Scenario Configurator opens automatically
15 Select Component View The Select Component View window opens
16 Choose Apply
17 Choose Assign Services The Assign Services to Application Component window opens
18 Press F4 to retrieve the available services
19 Choose Assign
20 Select the related service and choose OK
21 Assign a business service to all roles
22 Choose Configure Connections
23 Select the connections on the Service Assignment tab
24 Press F4 in the Communication Channel field
25 Select a communication channel This channel must be of type XI
NOTE
If the systems are applied from the SAP Landscape Directory the Integration Builder
automatically creates the communication channels
If the systems are not applied from the SAP Landscape Directory create communication
channels manually To do this choose an existing service and then choose Communication
Channel using context menu New You must assign a communication channel for each
connection
26 Choose OK and then choose Apply
27 Choose Generate to open the Create Configuration Objects window
28 Select Simulation then Generate then mark all in the list Scope of Generation
29 Choose Start to generate a log Check the log for errors and save it if required
30 In the Close Integration Scenario screen choose Apply
31 In the left pane select the Scenarios tab your scenario has been added
32 In the left pane select the Change List tab
33 Expand the Standard Change List
34 Right-click the scenario name Supply_Base_Management and select Activate
372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
In this section you check the integration scenario to which the Supplier Qualification business scenario is
assigned and the interfaces that are used for communication between SAP ERP and SAP Supplier
Relationship Management (SAP SRM) For the Supplier Qualification business scenario the
Supply_Base_Management integration scenario provides the following interfaces which you can check in
the Integration Builder
SAP ERP Direction SAP SRM
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
5462 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
CremasCremas03 Asynchronous call (provider) ABAPBusinessPartnerOut
Procedure
1 Start the SAP Integration Builder
2 Choose Integration Builder Configuration
3 Under the Scenario tab expand the scenario to display detailed information
373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
For more information see SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM
ltreleasegt Basic Settings for SAP SRM SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5562
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
This page is left blank for documents that are printed on both sides
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
4 Supplier Qualification
You can use this business scenario to provide suppliers with the facility to register themselves using a
link on your companyrsquos homepage On registering the suppliers assign themselves to one or more
product categories
Once the purchaser has accepted the suppliers as potential business partners the suppliers can be
transferred to the operational procurement system via a defined interface (as a desired participant in
an RFx or as part of a supplier list for example)
You can find a scenario description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Select the Documentation tab
The SRM scenario and process descriptions are also available on SAP Help Portal at http
helpsapcom SAP Supplier Relationship Management Business Scenarios
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
You can find the complete configuration information for Supplier Qualification in SAP Solution Manager
under ltproject namegt Configuration SAP SRM ltreleasegt Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification
42 Registering Suppliers
The process Registering Suppliers consists of the following steps
1 Carry out self-registration
2 Answer questionnaires (e-mail)
3 Approve suppliers
4 Create business partner in SAP SRM or MM
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Registering Suppliers Select the Documentation tab
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
The process Managing Supplier Relationship consists of the following process steps
1 Assign supplier role
2 Enable editing of own data
4 Supplier Qualification
41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5762
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
3 Change own data
4 Accept changes in supplier data
5 Change supplier data
6 Lock supplier
7 Create approved supplier list
You can find a process description in SAP Solution Manager under ltproject namegt Scenarios Supplier
Qualification Business Processes Managing Supplier Relationship Select the Documentation tab
4 Supplier Qualification
43 Managing Supplier Relationship
5862 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
Typographic Conventions
Example Description
ltExamplegt Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words or characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system for example ldquoEnter your ltUser Namegtrdquo
Example Example
Arrows separating the parts of a navigation path for example menu options
Example Emphasized words or expressions
Example Words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation
httpwwwsapcom Textual cross-references to an internet address
example Quicklinks added to the internet address of a homepage to enable quick access to specific content on the Web
123456 Hyperlink to an SAP Note for example SAP Note 123456
Example Words or characters quoted from the screen These include field labels screen titles pushbutton labels menu names and menu options
Cross-references to other documentation or published works
Example Output on the screen following a user action for example messages Source code or syntax quoted directly from a program File and directory names and their paths names of variables and parameters and
names of installation upgrade and database tools
EXAMPLE Technical names of system objects These include report names program names transaction codes database table names and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text for example SELECT and INCLUDE
EXAMPLE Keys on the keyboard
2011-11-08 INTERNAL 5962
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 WalldorfGermany
T +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20
wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior noticeSome software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors National product specifications may varyThese materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies (ldquoSAP Grouprdquo) for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warrantySAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countriesPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepxtrademark for additional trademark information and notices
DisclaimerPlease see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enlegalcopyrightindexepx for disclaimer information and notices
Documentation in the SAP Service MarketplaceYou can find this document at the following address httpservicesapcomhttpservicesapcomsrm-instinstguides
6062 INTERNAL 2011-11-08
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-
SAP AGDietmar-Hopp-Allee 1669190 WalldorfGermanyT +4918 0534 34 34F +4918 0534 34 20wwwsapcom
copy Copyright 2013 SAP AG All rights reservedNo part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice
- SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP SRM 70 Supplier Qualification
-
- Table of Contents
- 1 Important Information About This Document
- 2 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification with Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 21 Activate Business Function
- 22 SAP Notes
- 23 User Management
-
- 231 User Management
- 232 More Information About User Management
-
- 24 Technical Settings
-
- 241 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 242 Performing Technical Settings
- 243 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 25 E-Mail Settings
- 26 Supplier Replication and Transfer
-
- 261 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (MM-SUS)
-
- 2611 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 2612 Role Settings
-
- 26121 Activate Role
-
- 2613 IDoc Settings
-
- 26131 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 2614 Settings for the Replication
-
- 26141 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 26142 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
- 26143 More Information About Settings for the Replication
-
- 262 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtCl)
-
- 2621 Technical Settings
-
- 26211 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
- 26212 More Information About Technical Settings
-
- 2622 Role and User Settings
-
- 26221 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 26222 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 263 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP SRM (OPI)
- 264 Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 2641 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 2642 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 2643 More Information About the Supplier Transfer from Supplier Self-Services to SAP ERP
-
- 27 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 28 Questionnaire Settings
- 29 Self-Registration User Interface
- 210 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 2101 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 2102 More Information About the Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 211 Personal Objects Worklist (POWL)
- 212 Business Add-Ins
- 213 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 2131 Importing Business Scenarios
- 2132 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 2133 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 3 Basic Settings for Supplier Qualification Without Customizing Switch Supplier Self-Registration
-
- 31 SAP Notes
- 32 Supplier Qualification Applications
-
- 321 Settings for Supplier Qualification
-
- 3211 Supplier Qualification Overview
- 3212 Configuring Supplier Qualification
-
- 322 E-Mail Settings
- 323 Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 3231 Making Settings for Business Partners
- 3232 More Information About Settings for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 324 Category and Hierarchy Settings
- 325 Questionnaire Settings
-
- 33 SRM Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 331 Configuring Supplier Preselection
- 332 Configuring Supplier Directory
- 333 More Information About Settings for Supplier Preselection and Supplier Directory
-
- 34 Supplier Replication from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services (Classic MM-SUS)
-
- 341 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP ERP to Supplier Self-Services
- 342 Role Settings
-
- 3421 Activate Role
-
- 343 IDoc Settings
-
- 3431 Setting Up IDocs
-
- 344 Settings for the Replication
-
- 3441 Setting Up Vendor Master Data
- 3442 More Information About Settings for the Replication
- 3443 Configuring User Exit VSV00001
-
- 35 Supplier Replication from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services (LocalExtended Classic)
-
- 351 Settings for the Replication of Suppliers from SAP SRM to Supplier Self-Services
- 352 Technical Settings
-
- 3521 Setting Up Services for Supplier Self-Services
-
- 353 Role and User Settings
-
- 3531 Configuring Supplier Self-Services User Management
- 3532 More Information About Role and User Settings
-
- 36 Business Add-Ins
- 37 SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 371 Importing Business Scenarios
- 372 Checking Integration Scenarios and Related Interfaces
- 373 More Information About SAP NetWeaver PI Settings
-
- 4 Supplier Qualification
-
- 41 Where to Find the Configuration Information for Supplier Qualification
- 42 Registering Suppliers
- 43 Managing Supplier Relationship
-
- Copyright and trademarks
-